Revit MEP Tutorials Metric ENG | Autodesk Revit | Building Information Modeling

Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

and plumbing engineering workflows. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical panels. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and piping. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. such as mechanical equipment. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. electrical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Germany. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as duct. and plumbing fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials.

views. such as templates and families.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. is located and accessed in the training files location. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. For example. Metric file names have an _m suffix. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. For example. NOTE Depending on your installation. Create schedules. as well as how to open and save them. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you can choose to save your work. Metric: files for users working with metric units. When you open a training file. However. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. to provide a richer and more finished design. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. however. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and tags. On the Contents tab. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you learn where the training files are located. templates. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create detail views. After completing each exercise. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and sheets to document the project. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. You do not design entire systems. when you add ductwork. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. your Training folder may be in a different location. annotations. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. In this exercise.

the Open dialog displays. For example. enter the new file name.rvt and make changes. and click Open.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. and you can open any supported file type. For File name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 3 In the right pane. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. verify that Project Files (*. Accessing Training Files | 5 . A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. scroll down. click ➤ Save As. 4 Click the training file name. a list of file types displays. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt) is selected. you are prompted to save the changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and click Save. and click the Training Files icon. For Files of type. if you open settings. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. double-click Imperial or Metric. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 8 If you have made changes.

6 .

These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the floor or roof remains connected. scope. drawings. In the Revit MEP model. the hierarchy of elements. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. sections. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and phases when you need it. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the operation of the software is parametric. schedules. the door retains this relationship to the partition. every drawing sheet. drawing sheets. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case. 2D and 3D view. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the parameter is one of association or connection. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. and schedules required for a building project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. hence. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You learn the terminology. ■ ■ 7 . In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If you move the partition. and plans.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. ducts. boilers. boilers. levels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. sprinklers. filled regions. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sinks. Examples include detail lines. tags. They help to describe or document the design. sprinklers. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When you change something. For example. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sinks. ducts. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. tags. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and electrical panels. walls and ceilings are hosts. and 2D detail components. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels. and keynotes are annotation elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. They display in relevant views of the design.

Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. However. you must be in a section or elevation view. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. If you can draw. Project: In Revit MEP. first floor. The project file contains all information for the building design. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. For example. Often. floors. for example.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. views of the project. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. families. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . or bottom of foundation. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. To place levels. This information includes components used to design the model. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Most often. In other cases. top of wall.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and ceilings. section views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. elevation views. and so forth). you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. schedules. and types. By using a single project file. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. such as roofs. In Revit MEP. North . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you do nothing to establish these relationships. programming is not required.

System families can be transferred between projects. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Then experiment with them. For example. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. or layer the views to see only the one on top. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. each in-place family contains only a single type. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Type: Each family can have several types. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). For example. A type can also be a style. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. However. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and similar graphical representation. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). A type can be a specific size of a family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. hiding.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and wires. With a few clicks. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. showing. For example. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. pipes. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families include ducts. identical use. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. You can also display several project views at one time. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as a A0 title block.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

then select what you want to modify. data and systems. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and for switching views. and settings.. project and system parameters. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. When working on the Modify tab. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for editing existing elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.

For example.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. closes the application menu (double-click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides requested information. when adding duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. To keep a panel expanded. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . By default. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

(Save) save the current drawing with a new name.. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click.. select a file to open.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Export) On the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ..

click. annotation..On the application menu. family. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. but is not enabled by default. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. or template file. Camera.. to. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. publish the current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. and Walkthrough. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Print) access product and license information. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Publish) print the current drawing.. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. saves a current project.

click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. when you switch to another editing mode. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. To hide the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. check the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. However. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or the Family Editor. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. workshared components. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. In addition. Starting with the most recent command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. displaying the same information. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .To undo or redo a series of operations. Group. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. When you are using a command. Clipboard. Modify. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . for example. Place a Wall. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. On the Quick Access toolbar.To cancel or exit the current command. click (Modify).

) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. In the following steps. click Training Files. Zoom the view In the tutorials. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

9 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. To modify or add snap increments. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. In the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. on the Navigation bar. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 . click . The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 6 Click in the drawing area.

and then using the Zoom tool again. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click the SteeringWheels tab. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. and click tin the Options dialog. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click and drag to orbit the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Level 2 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. 3 Click and drag the bottom control.HVAC Plan . and select the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 .Design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Small blue dots. These are the drag controls. called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. referred to as shape handles. as shown. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. 2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

on the Standard toolbar. Move. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.

and drag it to the left as shown.Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . In this case. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. such as Move and Copy.

For example. Click OK. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 13 To end a command.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice. 14 Enter VG.Supply.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric ➤ Templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. use copy/monitor. create and manage views. click Training files. You can choose from several templates. Finally. such as the default project units and settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 27 . under Template file. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 2 In the New Project dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and open North. system families. link files. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and loadable families. and modify system settings. 5 In the New Project dialog. and geometry from the starting template. 7 In the Project Browser. You can either select a template from the template library. you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. 6 Click OK. under Create new. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. settings. click Browse. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as coordination review and interference checking. In that case. and click Open. the default building levels and standard views. such as ducts and pipes. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.rte template. New projects inherit all the families.

Click OK. create another new project using the Construction template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. navigate to Metric Templates. NH. select School or University. ■ ■ Under Create new. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. When you select the material. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click (Browse). (Browse).rte template and click Open. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.8 In the drawing area. For Location. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Level 1. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Project template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. In the Choose Template dialog. under Energy Analysis. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . for Energy Data. for City. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. ■ For Building Construction. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click Edit. you can select it now. select Manchester. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. review the construction materials listed. Click OK twice. Click Cancel. If you want to use a template other than the default. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Browse. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. For example. 10 Using the same method.

140.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 26 In the right pane. and 140. for 90. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 110. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.00 mm.00 mm. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and demand factors for electrical systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. for 90. 24 In the right pane.00 mm. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.00 mm.00 mm. piping. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. click Rectangular. power distribution systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 20. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Categories. Click OK twice.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 22 In the right pane. click Wiring. 23 In the left pane. under Pipe Settings. 260.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 33 Click OK.00 mm.00 mm. select Identity Data.000 mm. under Duct Settings. Holding CTRL. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. and 310. click Round. 110. 25 In the left pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm.rfa and click Open. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Sizes. plumbing. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. wiring. 27 Click OK. select Views. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 290.

Click Open. under Template file. select Associated Level. select Project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. families. select Sub-Discipline. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. sheets. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. From the Positioning list. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Select Ascending Click OK twice. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Sort by. To enable this coordination. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. click Browse. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 5 Click OK. click Training. under Create new. In addition. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. For Then by. select Family and Type. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 38 Close the file. select Auto . For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and groups that are contained in a project. select View Name. Linking Projects In this exercise. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.Origin to Origin. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.rvt.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views.

15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. select the linked architectural model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . select Room Bounding. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.Mech. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking Projects | 31 . 8 If necessary.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. under Constraints.

17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click Plan View types. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. click the level line for 03. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 19 On the left side of the view.Floor. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.

Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click By Host View. If you modify a monitored element. level 3. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. indicating that a relationship is established. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click Custom.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. and click to select the linked model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. for the link file. appears above the copied elements. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. indicating that an element has changed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. highlight the linked model. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. and that the copied elements are monitored. select Custom. Linking Projects | 33 . After copying. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. a warning message displays. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. warnings notify you of any violations. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. and the level 4. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 29 In the drawing area. 34 On the Basics tab. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

Roads. click Custom. Under Visibility. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. and Topography. for the link file. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 36 Click OK. Under Visibility. for V/G Overrides RVT Links.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 5 On the Basics tab. under View Properties. for Name. Planting. select Custom. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Custom. deselect Levels. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Click OK. deselect Parking. Site. 2 In the New View Template dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. click Edit. 3 In the View templates dialog. 7 Click OK twice. Click OK.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines.

Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 8 Click ➤ Options. and your username when using worksharing. These settings control the graphics. 3 Under Colors. 9 In the Options dialog. select Mechanical and click OK. they are not saved to project files or template files. under View Templates. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. and click OK. click Training Files. 2 In the Options dialog. selection default options. journal cleanup options. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. click Browse. select Invert background color. under Template file. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. notification preferences. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 .rte. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 5 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the Graphics tab.

select One hour. and click OK. family template files. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. the elements causing the error display using this color. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 18 Select the wall. 14 Click OK. 12 Click the General tab. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. For Tooltip assistance. When an error occurs.10 Under Colors. 11 In the Color dialog. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 13 Under Notifications. you specify default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. select yellow. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. However. and family libraries. click the value for Selection color. 21 Close the file without saving it. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select None. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. including your default project template. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click the File Locations tab. 19 Press ESC to end the command.

It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However. 7 In the Options dialog. centralized. select the folder to save your files to by default. TIP To view a template. saving. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Browse. or loading a Revit MEP file. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 8 Click Cancel. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 10 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. click Browse. Load. under Default path for family template files. ➤ New ➤ Project. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 5 Under Default path for user files. In the following illustration. such as in a large. 4 Click Cancel. Click and click Browse to select a template. and click Open. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Save. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. you can start a new project with that template. click Places. You can modify the existing library names and path. When you are opening. note the list of library names.3 Under Default template file. and you can create new libraries. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click (Add Value). and click (Browse). and change the name to My Library. or families. and select it as the library path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. templates. Save. and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click OK twice. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Load.11 In the Places dialog. click the My Library icon. click My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

(Remove Value) to delete the library. view the current path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and decal image files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. specify the new location here. click Edit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 9 In the text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. This path is determined during installation. click the Spelling tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 2 In the Options dialog.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 20 Click ➤ Options. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 5 In the text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 22 Select My Library. click OK. If you want to relocate this path. 14 Click in the drawing area. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. select Ignore words in uppercase. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you work in a large office. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Places. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. such as bump maps. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 11 In the Options dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 27 Click OK.

As you zoom in and out within a view. and enter 500 . 6 In the Snaps dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Close the file without saving it. click Edit. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. click OK. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Browse. under Template file.rte. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 24 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Close. 23 In the text editor. under Dimension Snaps. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. delete sheetmtl-CU. 20 Under Settings. click the Spelling tab. In this exercise. click Restore Defaults.17 In the Spelling dialog. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 4 In the New Project dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. you modify snap settings.

you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.7 Under Object Snaps. snapping reverts to the system default settings. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. use the wheel button on your mouse. deselect Chain. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. enter SM. TIP To zoom while sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. click OK. If it does not. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. While sketching. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. For example. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and the wall edges. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. with or without saving it. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and specify the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. 19 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and delete the value 500 . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

methodology. you can choose to save your work. you first plan the system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After applying a color scheme to the zones. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the mechanical system. In this lesson.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.autodesk. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This system consists of a cooling tower. you first configure the linked architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. At the end of the tutorial. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this exercise. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. water source heat pump (WSHP). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. duct system and a hydronic piping system. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. and then you create a plenum level. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow. 45 . After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. However.

make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and after the linked model highlights. roof. not in the MEP training file. ceilings. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. In this section. select Room Bounding.rvt. NOTE When working with a linked file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you add a level for plenums. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and click OK. click to select it. and double-click West . you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Next.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). These components are defined in the architectural training file.

Preparing Spaces | 47 . 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Draw panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. enter 2600mm. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). For Offset. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 16 Press Esc. and click Properties. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). right-click Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click Plan View Types. The new level is placed. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.

and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Level Above (Level 3). and click Apply Default View Template. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Design.Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. enter 0. select Plenum Plan. for Level. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Sub-Discipline. However. In the next exercise. Under Extents. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Under Identity Data. for View Range. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. for View Scale. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. for Default View Template.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Under View Depth. for Top. enter an Offset of 300mm. and for Offset. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. select MEP . For Cut plane. In this exercise. ■ Click OK twice. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you place spaces in areas of the building model. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. For View Classification. click Edit.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. walls. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . and ceilings). In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Space. select Level 2 Plenum. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. select Horizontal. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. For (Tag Location). 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. Click OK.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). ensuring coordination between the files. enter 219. For Name. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.7 Click to place the space. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 14 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .

Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Offset. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter 0.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. for Upper Limit. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and then press Esc. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 3.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and select Corridor. and scroll to the newly placed space. click in the name column. which was numbered 219Q. In the schedule. and change the space number to 216A. 9 In the schedule. 10 Click in the number column. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 11 Close the schedule view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. as shown. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. place a space in the lower area of the split space.16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. you place a space in a chase.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

select Interior and Reference. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and click Element Properties. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Enter VG. click in the chase area to place the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and then click OK. 12 Click in the section view. For Offset. In the plan view. for Upper Limit. select Level 3. enter 0. right-click. select Roof Level. On the Options Bar. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select the space.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views.

19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. enter 1200. enter Chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. floors. Under Identity Data. and maximize the view. for Name. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 15 Press Esc.Space Plan. enter 225PC. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. For Number. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. ceilings. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Bounding elements (such as walls. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. under Loaded Tags. and click OK.■ For Limit Offset.

Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. which removes the space from the Default zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. After a space is placed in an area. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercises. In this exercise. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Reference. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .20 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. under Spaces.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. click Training Files. To display space reference lines. The Zone tool is active. As you do this. indicating that it’s the active view. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. ) or 5 In the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and a new zone is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. under Energy Analysis. under Spaces. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). click Reference. and verify the zones in the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. you assign spaces to a zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. select Occupiable. indicating that the space is occupiable. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 4 In the drawing area. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and Electrical 220 spaces. type VG. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction 221. In the System Browser. select HVAC Zones. Expand HVAC Zones. and click Finish Editing Zone. and modify the zone properties. Using the Edit Zone tab. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 5 With the drawing area active. select Computer Lab 222.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Instruction.

you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. for Name.Area B. under Identity Data. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. and click OK. You activated zone visibility in the views.Zoning view to activate it. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Reference. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. enter 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zone in the System Browser. expand 2 . To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. 5 Click in the Level 1 . under Spaces. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 9 In the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. click Finish Editing Zone.TIP After you finish editing the zone.West . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 8 In the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Select Attached End. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . zoom out.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.

19 Close the file with or without saving it.East. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. double-click the zone tag. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.rvt. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you verify the building. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Front. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Name Value. verify that Wireframe is selected. In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and click OK. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. and zone information. double-click Level 1 . Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. enter Lounge . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. click Training Files. space. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and select 109 Lounge.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. on the ViewCube.Zoning to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ ■ On the Details tab. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. select 1_South_Area C. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Next. With 109 Lounge selected.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click (Highlight). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.

This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. cooling air temperature. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab.11 °C : 32. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. select 109 Lounge. verify that 23. and click OK. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and then click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. scroll down in the left pane. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click (Shading). For People. click . click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.22 °C : N/A is specified. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that 21. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and dehumidification set point. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Next. and then click OK. and humidification set point. For Heating Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Construction Type. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and air changes per hour. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This indicates the heating set point. Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. the space information displays for the selected space. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Cooling Information. and in the People dialog. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). outdoor air per area. For Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. click .22 °C : N/A is specified.33 °C : 12. heating air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones.

The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. roofs. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 0. select Level 3. floors.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. open MEP . 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Offset. 12 Using the methods learned previously. click Cancel. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and other room-bounding components.

Click OK. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. space. select Plenum. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Number. For Name. enter 212P. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and select space Plenum 212P. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. In this exercise. you verified building. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void. select Plenum. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and zone information. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .

For Building Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 . and click Element Properties. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 300 is specified. On the Place tab. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. verify that <Building> is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. right-click. for Energy Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Click OK twice. click Edit. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). click Training Files. for City. For Postal Code. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NH. For Ground Plane. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. select space Library 219. verify that Level 1 is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. enter 03101. verify that Manchester. verify that New Construction is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. In order to select a space. is selected. under Volume Computations. For Project Phase. 8 In the drawing area. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. On the Weather tab. For Sliver Space Tolerance. this option adjusts the times automatically. you need to select this option. for Building Service. under Energy Analysis. select School or University.Space Plan. If.rvt. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Export Complexity. For Location. and click OK.

■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Click OK. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. enter 60 W. For People. For Latent. select Specified. Next. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Values. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sensible. 12 Click the Details tab. verify that Manchester. for Values. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. enter 45 W. select Library . ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. click Edit. Select the space associated with the warning. select Specified. is specified. or neither. select Actual. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. For Location. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and click OK. select Heated and cooled. verify that <Building> is specified. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Actual. For Building Service. You have verified the building information. For Condition Type.Audio Visual. and enter 15 sq. and then click . click in the Value column. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. m. verify that School or University is selected. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Space Type. Under Power. Under Heat Gain (per Person). If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. both. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Building Construction. Click OK twice. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Select Area per person. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Edit.

click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. 17 In the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. select 219 Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and zone information for the building model. 15 Review the loads report for project. You should correct the space error in the building model. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click Calculate. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. weather. 19 In the drawing area. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and can be modified here. space. and click OK. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. There should be no warnings displayed. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. or zone information. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 .click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 219 Library. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and under Heating Information. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click Information). otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.Space Plan. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. and a loads report displays. 21 Click OK. In this exercise.11°C. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 16 After you review the loads report. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. under Energy Analysis. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library.

Click OK. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. indicating that it’s the active view. in relatively small increments.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select HVAC Zones. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. For Color Scheme. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Cooling Load . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. select the color scheme legend. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Expanded Ranges. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . click Training Files.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.rvt. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise.

(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Schedule building components. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select HVAC. In the Fields dialog. For Formula. for Formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. and then click .Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Browse). For Type. Select Formula. select Spaces. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Name. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Under Available fields. select New Construction. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. Click OK. and click OK. For Phase. select Spaces. For Discipline. for Select available fields from. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Air Flow. select Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Calculated Value dialog. enter . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. more category options are available. enter Airflow Delta. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Space Fill is the active view.

When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. In the Color dialog. Header. and click OK. and then click Conditional Format.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Not Between. a view opens that contains the selected space. verify that Show is highlighted. Click OK twice. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Level. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. select red. For Then by. For Fields. and Blank line. For Value. Under Conditions to Use. click the color swatch. For Background Color. select Level. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ The schedule displays. select Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . right-click to access schedule properties. Select Ascending. select Number. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s.

and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. In this lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. and work with the airflow schedule. 79 . After system creation. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. After completing the air systems lesson. you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. As you place the air terminals.

Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. click Training Files. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the ceiling view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

The schedule updates with the new flow data. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and press Enter. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify that Constrain is cleared. 9 On the Placement panel. 13 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 215 L/s. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . If the host element is modified or moved. select the diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. click Place on Face. and then press Esc to end the command.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Also. which in this case is the ceiling grid. type 3600. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 15 On the Options Bar. and then select both Copy and Multiple.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 17 Move the cursor down. for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. clear Leader. As you place the return diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Place on Face. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and click Open. 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Next. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. select one of the diffusers. and then press Esc. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. click Yes. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 22 In the drawing area. as shown.

select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. and click OK. and click to select the lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. under Other. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. click Yes.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area.

Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. align the other return diffuser. and then press Esc twice. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select the vertical grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 43 Using the same method.

and click OK.44 While pressing Ctrl. 47 Using the same method. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . under Mechanical. and on the Options Bar. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. enter 310 L/s. clear LeftArrow. for Flow. and click Element Properties. and press Enter. right-click. select both return diffusers. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . click Training Files. 9 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 10 In the drawing area. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.rvt. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Plan . 8 In the Type Selector. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click 1 : 100. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select M_Supply Diffuser . and double-click Level 1 . the space crossing lines display. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.200 Neck. In the left pane of the Open dialog. at the lower left corner of the building. 2 On the View Control Bar.Design to make it the active view. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand HVAC .

for Offset.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Press Esc. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. enter 170 L/s. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. By copying the diffuser. type 6000. As a result. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. for Flow. move the cursor down. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 .Airflow. Click OK. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Enter. under Constraints. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. 11 Select the diffuser. Under Mechanical . the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. Also. enter 2400. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.16 Using the same method. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. under space 115. select Air Terminals. under Other. it is a negative value. and Flow. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Next. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 27 In the schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 25 Click OK 3 times. mark. Mark. and then right-click in the schedule. for Sort by.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. for Flow. For Category. Type. select Mark. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 29 Using the same method. for Embedded Schedule. enter 210 L/s. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. tile the windows. click Edit. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 26 Using the method learned previously. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. type. double-click System Type. and press Enter. select 21. under Available Fields.

HVAC Plan . select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. as shown. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. and maximize Level 1 . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design. As you highlight the zone. 31 In the drawing area.

7-18 kW . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.High Efficiency .43 W (approximately 1. 35 In the Type Selector.Horizontal .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. and under Energy Analysis. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.3 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 36 In the drawing area. select M_WSHP .

Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. the space crossing lines display. and click OK. As you add diffusers to systems. When you highlight a space. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the system components. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.rvt. for Constraints ➤ Offset. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. including energy analysis. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. and click View ➤ Systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. enter . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . After creating the logical connection. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Design is highlighted. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the title. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. indicating that it’s the active view. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and the system connects them. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). review the Number of Elements. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 15 Click Cancel. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Flow value. Connect Into. 17 Using the method learned previously. 18 Click OK. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 12 In the System Browser. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. System Name. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. the air terminals are the children. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. On the Options Bar.

for System Name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.rvt. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 22 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.Rename the system Next. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. under Identity Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. click Training Files. under Mechanical. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter 3000. For Offset.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. For Offset. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Select Branch. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). In this case. for Solution Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Network. select the upper left diffuser. For Duct Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. For Duct Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the Network type provides several solutions. enter 3000.HVAC Plan. For Flex Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. indicating that it’s the active view. and display solution 1. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . A Generate Layout tab displays. which provides various layout tools. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Settings. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Also. the space crossing lines display.

Click OK. click Modify.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. as shown. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. or offset elevations are incorrect. enter 900. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. For example. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. you’ll get an error in a later step. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .Flow. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. If the entire network does not highlight. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . fittings. The first time you press Tab. you can verify connectivity as you create a system.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. a disconnection exists. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and equipment. for Color Scheme. Usually. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Using a flow-based color scheme. highlight a segment of the main duct. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and click to select it. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. thus it is not part of the system. and click OK. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

and on the Options Bar.Airflow. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. but not all values are used in this view. for Flow. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 20 In the drawing area. under Graphics. for Values Displayed. select By View. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and then click OK.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the WSHP. and press Enter. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.

28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Schemes. select Friction.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Duct Color Fill . Select Only. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. highlight a segment of the duct. Click OK. click Cancel. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and select 400. Select the upper segment of main duct. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and drag it to the right. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Calculated Size Only. and then click to select it. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.Velocity. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Select Restrict Height. 26 Click OK. for Branch Sizing. select the color scheme legend. and enter .65 Pa/m. Under Constraints.

so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. static pressure. and pressure loss. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.The ductwork and fittings are updated. pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Using this tool. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Use the information that displays (flow.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click Finish. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.NOTE As you inspect a system.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. Front.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. right-click the connector grip. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. NOTE When drawing duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. for Offset.3D MEP.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select the top right diffuser. enter 3000. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. The ductwork is automatically created.

25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .22 Using the same method. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 30 Press Esc twice. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

and click to select it. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Using the same method.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. for Flow.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Mechanical . 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. such as a plenum. select a segment of the main duct.

108 .

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. Automatically and manually lay out piping. In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you place mechanical equipment. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. 109 . Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Create return and supply piping systems. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. on level 3 of the building model.

HVAC Plan .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select M_WSHP . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Left Return .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. in corridor 328. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.Horizontal High Efficiency .7-18kW . click Training Files. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

and enter 600. and click to place the dimension. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 14 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. as shown.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the 2 WSHPs.

and click to place it in the mechanical room. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Click Modify. Click OK. as shown. for Water Flow. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. enter 0. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. enter 2750.75 L/s.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. but without a corresponding system. analyses cannot be performed. Unlike logical connections (systems). including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 Close the file with or without saving it. You can create pipes to connect system components. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components.

This display indicates that the system is selected. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan .Mech 330). As you assign equipment to systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. where it is easier to review the information. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. right-click the Systems column heading. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. indicating that it’s the active view. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. Therefore.rvt. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select the 2 WSHPs. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . while pressing Ctrl.Design is highlighted. 5 In the System Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.

select the boiler. and the Edit System tool is not active.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. for System Name. for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. You have created the hydronic return system. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 17 On the Options Bar. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 12 In the drawing area. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 25 Select the boiler. 23 Close the roof plan view. 19 In the Project Browser.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and bypasses the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. double-click Roof . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower.Design.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In heating mode. In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. under Design ➤ HVAC . select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. expand Piping. and click Select. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you can view several parameters. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 32 In the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. for Water Flow.8. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Properties. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. indicating the logical connection. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click Expand All. under Mechanical. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Column Settings. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. enter 0. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 28 Using the same method. 29 Right-click CHWS. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.

3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . A system preview displays in red. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the boiler. select Mechanical Equipment.rvt. you can place the cursor over a system component. press Tab to highlight the system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. When you draw a box to select components. indicating that it’s the active view. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. then the Select a System dialog displays. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design is highlighted. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .Mech 330). drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Check None. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.

The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that Solutions is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 13 Click Cancel. It does not reference the architecture. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components. select CHWR. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.9 In the Select a System dialog. click Settings. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. 10 Click OK. enter 450. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. 11 On the Options Bar. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. duct. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

75 L/s. and press Tab 3 times. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . the flow for each WSHP is 0. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.16 Click Finish Layout. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. With each Tab. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

50 L/s. 24 Press Esc. under Mechanical. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 22 Select the boiler. 23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 1. notice that the Water Flow is 1. and access its instance properties.75 L/s). This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK.50 L/s.

the Number of Elements is now 8. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). double-click Level 1 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . On the Options Bar.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. click Edit System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Logically.Design. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 35 Using the drag control. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you physically close the CHWR loop. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.44 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. access its instance properties.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. and click Cancel. which propagates flow throughout the system. as shown. Next. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. note that the value for Flow is 4. 38 Using the same method. under Mechanical. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 6.94 L/s.

00%. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 0. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. select a WSHP. and then click OK. Click Settings. enter 450. For Slope.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.

In a later exercise.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. as shown. 46 Click Modify. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 50 Using the same method. To create the piping system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 51 Click Finish Layout. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select a different layout solution. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. As you work in the training file. double-click 3D Building. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design is highlighted. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. click Training Files. and the return pipes are magenta. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. indicating that it’s the active view. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.

7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .

■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. 12 In the 3D view.11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and the lower one is secondary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 13 In the plan view. select the return pipe riser. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).

You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 600. enter 381. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. for Offset. and you select 1 connector. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

and click OK. and the appropriate fittings are created. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 19 In the plan view. 18 Press Esc twice. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select the primary base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.

and click the minus symbol. and click to draw the pipe. and select it. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. right-click the bottom connector. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. as shown. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. you select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

for Offset. 29 If necessary. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe.28 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1200. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc. these pipe connections were created automatically.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 2850. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset.■ Move the cursor down.

Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping.50 or 50% of the Flow.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. 43 Press Esc. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 46 Press Esc. 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 40 Click Cancel. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. as shown. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. right-click. which is rounded up to 3. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK.44 L/s). notice that Flow is 6. In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump. under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. right-click. 41 Using the same method. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. the value is 0 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 44 In the 3D view.44 L/s. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. notice that under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. 48 In the plan view.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and close the dialog. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 50 In the 3D View. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Adding Valves In this exercise.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.52 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. When the valve is open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).

4 On the Options Bar. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. and select M_Ball Valve . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 145 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.

50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. place another M_Ball Valve . 12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc.

under Mechanical. Adding Valves | 147 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. right-click. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click OK. validate that the Flow is 6. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. 19 Using the same method.44 L/s.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. validate that the Flow is 6. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 20 Select the bypass valve. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select M_Ball Valve . Initially. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Sizing Pipe In this exercise. In heating mode. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s.rvt. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.HVAC Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Size. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Design is highlighted. and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. as shown. click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. select Pipe Color Fill .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Flow.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click OK. Under Constraints. and for Velocity. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.5 m/s. Select And. or manually modify the pipe. enter 1. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 13 Press Esc. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. and click to select the branch. or offset elevations are incorrect. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select a different layout solution.

The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and double-click 3D Building. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. click Training Files. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the System Inspector. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. pressure. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System | 151 .Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss. as required. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This information helps you modify the system design. as shown. flow.

you need to validate them.0 L/s. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 32° C. In this exercise. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .rvt.4 Pa. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and double-click Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.1 Pa. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Fluid Temperature. inspect Section 6 again. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Warnings display. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.7. click Training Files. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Using the same method. and to size pipe. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. targeting those systems that need attention. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design.Note that the Flow is 1. the Static Pressure is 41916.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.

Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. thus assigning the components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.HVAC Plan . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and click Expand All. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. the pipe is associated with that system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. expand the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. click Close. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and confirm unassigned system components. 4 In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Show to view all of the system components. otherwise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.Design floor plan. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. After you have assigned all components to systems. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and for pipe sizing. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and click View. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 9 Right-click CHWS. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Using the same methods. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. In the System Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and select Level 3 . right-click Hydronic Return. 6 In the Project Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. After you assign components to a system.HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 .

and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. enter 1. Select Correction Factor. select 90. Click OK. For Temperature.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In the left pane of the Open dialog. wiring. ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. speeding up the design phase.rvt. select Wiring Types. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Material. enter 70. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter THHN. click Training Files. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. expand Wiring . select Copper.04.Wire Sizes. and demand factors that are applied in the design. For Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . distribution systems. As you place components and create circuits. ■ Click New Correction Factor. You also add a wiring type.

select THHN. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 120/240. For Max Size. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Wires. select 10000 VA. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. enter 250. For Minimum. select 120. enter 50. enter 240. enter 220. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane.0. enter 240. Select Neutral Required. For Insulation. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Neutral Size. select Single. enter 1. By specifying a range.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Phase. Click Split. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Distribution Systems. enter 2000. For L-L Voltage. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 3. select 75. select Steel. select Power. For Conduit Type. select 240. Under More Than. For Value. Click OK. For L-G Voltage. select Voltage Definitions. For Neutral Multiplier. For Maximum. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . select Hot Conductor Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.

zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Lighting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . select Electrical . click Add. 5 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2 . its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. select Electrical.Lighting Plan. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. under the Electrical .rvt. select Illuminance. select Spaces. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. restrooms. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Discipline. Later in the tutorial. Under Categories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter Required Lighting Level. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Verify that Instance is selected. such as offices. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). click Training Files. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Click OK twice. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Lighting group in the space element properties. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. For Group Parameter Under. and conference rooms. For Type of Parameter.

The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . enter Lighting Levels.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. enter 485. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.Lighting. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. double-click Required Lighting Level. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. under Electrical . Click OK. and for Key Name. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. select Spaces. Select Schedule Keys. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. For Name. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. enter Open Office. under Available Fields.

The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. which is mapped to project units.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Notice that as you enter the data.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. change the sort order back to the default setting. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 22 Using the same method.Lighting Plan. 21 Click OK twice.

that Required Lighting Level is blank. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. under Identity Data. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. select Instruction-Standard. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. 27 Click OK. click (Open). Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. In this exercise. for Lighting Levels. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. the value input applies only to the selected space. Later in this exercise. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values.

For Color. click (Duplicate). 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. and click (Add Value) five times.rvt. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. verify the By Range is selected. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. ■ Click OK. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. enter 900. enter 200. Select the scheme for 450. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. click (Add Value) again. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. for Category. and press Enter. for Name. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. select Required Lighting Level. enter Required Lighting Levels.00 lx. enter 800. and press ENTER. and click (Add Value). if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. and press ENTER. and in the At Least column. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. For example. Under Schemes. click Training Files. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter Required Lighting and click OK. Select the scheme for 500 lx. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .00.00 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20.00.00 lx. 00 lx still selected.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Title. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. select Spaces. then the new value will be 400 lx.

For Color Scheme.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Number. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Lighting Delta. select Spaces. select Electrical. and Required Lighting Level. Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . For Type. select Illuminance. For Name. Click OK. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. Level.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Lighting CF. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. and double-click Level 2 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. 13 Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. Average Estimated Illumination. for Available Fields. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 8 In the drawing area. select Spaces. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.

for Formula. On the Formatting tab. for Custom Colors. select Required Lighting Level. Click OK three times. press the spacebar. Click Conditional Format. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Level. Click OK twice.■ For Formula. type a hyphen. Select Header. For Value. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Fields. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Sort by. select Not Between. select Lighting Delta. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Test. select Average Estimated Illumination. Select Blank Line. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. and click Browse. Click Background Color. under Condition. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK. click Browse. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Red.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. as you place lighting fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. Then. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. power circuits. 171 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.

select the color for Less Than 200 lx. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. select the color legend. Click OK. In the Color dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Under Scheme Definition.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. 2 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . for Basic Colors. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. for the Spaces Category. select Orange. click Training Files. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. You can create additional color schemes. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Lighting Ceiling plan.Lighting CF view is open. By using orange as the color for this range.

indicating a value greater than 0 fc. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 13 Click the Level 2 . The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.

The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 19 Press ESC to end the command. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. the fixtures will move accordingly. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.277V. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 fc range.the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range is satisfied. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

for Apparent Load. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Name dialog. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter 162. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. for Name enter and click OK.

specify 15000. and Receptacles | 183 . and click OK. click the value for Initial Color. select the top center fixture. click Training Files.00 lm.93. Under Photometrics.rvt. for Color Preset. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Lamp. junction boxes. and receptacles to your design. Junction Boxes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. for Type Mark. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. ■ Click Apply. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Click OK twice. Junction Boxes. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.85. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Under Electrical. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Placing Switches. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. for Ballast Loss Factor. click (Open). enter . enter F15. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the next exercise. In the Select File dialog. you add switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Luminous Flux. 9 In space Library 219. select 463T5_S. Under Photometrics. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.ies and click Open. click the value for Initial Intensity. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select Xenon and click OK. select T5 [HO]. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and click Open. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches.

21 In the drawing area. Click OK twice. 15 Select the junction box. In the Type Properties dialog. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . NOTE When entering values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.Offset. zoom to space Library 219. for Mark. Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Level 2 . enter 2750. Under Electrical. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Distribution System. Select Load. 23 In the System Browser. and Voltage. 24 For any column. Junction Boxes. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Placing Switches. Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Number. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Size. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. Expand Electrical. Click OK. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary. right-click and click Column Settings. and Number of Elements.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

move the cursor along the wall. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 .

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and work toward the higher voltage. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.equipment. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.Surface: 100A. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. 2 In the drawing area.208V MCB . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). click (Open).

for Distribution System. Click OK. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. enter 20.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Distribution System.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. select 480/277 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. for Max. enter LP-2B. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. For Panel Name. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK.480V MCB . enter PP-2B.Loads. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. For Panel Name.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . and for Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. click (Open). 42 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click Training Files. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . and for Category. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. click Check None. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter 2.Loads.rvt. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Hot Conductors. except without wire.39 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and create permanent wiring. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area.

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. ■ 16 In the System Browser. expand Power. Distribution System. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Voltage. Rating. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and then expand circuit 1. right-click on the Systems heading. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Expand Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 13 In the System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click Tags. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Electrical. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. change the Voltage to 277V. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. enter FR4. For Circuit Number. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. select Break. under Identity Data. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 47 In the drawing area. click Edit Type. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Yes. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 54 Select all of the tags. Next you create a switch system. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. click Training Files. enter a comma. click (Open). 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for File Name. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Click OK. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 52 In the Save As dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.rvt. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.rfa. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 57 In the Filter dialog.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Check None. and for Category. and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. Click Save.

13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Click OK.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 2 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter a. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. enter b. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.

and for Category. for Hot Conductors. click Training Files. and data systems. Creating Power Loads | 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 7 In space Electrical 220. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.Loads. 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Click OK. click (Open). enter 2. and click Element Properties. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. under Electrical . Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). lighting. Circuits are used for power. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the drawing area. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane.rfa. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .13 Select the wire again. select Wiring. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Load Family dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. 19 Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Open. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.

23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 29 In space Instruction 221. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. select the PP-2B panel. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle.

31 Close the file with or without saving it.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Next you balance the loads for your design. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. for Rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1-#12. Click OK. enter 30A. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Finally. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 1-#12. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#10. select panel LP-2B. click Open. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Had there been a greater imbalance. 3 In the Electrical space. After re-balancing loads.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. the distribution is shifted. Scroll down. zoom to space Electrical 220. click Training Files. click Rebalance Loads. 6 Click OK. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Under Electrical-Loads.

Loads. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and click OK. enter 25A. and click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click Finish Editing Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 14 Close the warning dialog. 15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Electrical . 17 Close the warning dialog. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. enter 40A.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Rating. select the transformer TP-2B. 24 Click Select Panel.Loads. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.

Select PP-2B. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Body Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. select Bold and Italic. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 5 In the Project Browser. for Font. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.Panel Schedules. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Under Header Text. enter 4 mm. and open E601 . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 4 Close the report. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. expand Sheets (all). 10 Click OK twice. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. select Berlin Sans FB. for Appearance. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click (Open). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. enter 5 mm. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size. under Other. click Edit. Under Header Text. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font Size.

3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.rvt. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click Training Files. click (Open). 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. select MDP-1. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. 15 In the dialog.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. under Warnings. Checking Your Design | 215 . zoom to space Electrical 214. 17 In the drawing area. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

right-click PVC . and click Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. type PVC . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Vent. you create a PVC pipe type. 219 .Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Duplicate. 4 In the Name dialog. and verify that Level 1 . in addition to loading existing families. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Training Files. Adding a pipe size. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. planning is critical to a successful design. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In this exercise.rvt.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary. and click OK. In this lesson. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 6 Click OK. enter 10°. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 15 For System Type. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 22 Click New Size. and click Main. Tee.006 mm. select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings. under Pipe Types.PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. PVC . and click OK.DWV: Standard.DWV: Standard. In the Project Browser. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Cross.Sch 40 .rfa. for Nominal. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . for Material.000 mm. under Mechanical. 21 In the right pane. 25 For Outside. enter 46. enter 54. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter -1250. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. select Tee.293 mm. 26 Click OK. select M_Tee Sanitary . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 45. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select None. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. click Modify. select Sanitary. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Branch.DWV. Tap. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .Vent is listed. 17 In the left pane. 18 For System Type. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 10 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 . select Plastic. 27 For the new pipe size.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. 221 . Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the cold water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. The base is placed. and click OK. for example. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. as shown.

You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 27 For Offset. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.Sanitary. enter -350 mm. for Solution Type. 25 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -350 mm.Sanitary. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 28 On the Options Bar. select Main. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Solutions. select Intersections. and click OK. enter 1.05%. 23 For Pipe Type.19 On the Options Bar. 26 For Pipe Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and modify it to meet project requirements. select PVC . 29 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. The default settings are automatically modified. select PVC . The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Branch. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select 100 mm. You accept this suggested solution. 30 Click Modify. and click Settings. and for Offset. for Slope. enter -1225. 21 On Options Bar. 24 For Offset.

select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Overall. When a fitting is reversed.

40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control.

6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Public. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.rvt. click Training Files. in the Type Selector.Rectangular. 5 On the Placement panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. under M_Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. select 560 mmx560 mm . 4 On the Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan .

8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify.2. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. enter 711. Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area.2. 11 In the System Browser. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.

In the System Browser.Overall.16 On the Edit System panel. 20 Select the fitting. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. 19 In the 3D view. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . click Finish Editing System. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing .

with the tee fitting selected. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. 27 Click Modify. enter 1. When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. enter 760 mm. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).05%. and click to draw the pipe.22 In the plan view. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. for Offset.

click to place the fitting.PVC . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . select Standard. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays. move the cursor over the stub pipe.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 29 In the Type Selector.

36 In the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 305 mm. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. enter 150 mm. 34 Press Esc.

42 Click Modify. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. enter 150 mm. press Spacebar. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 52 In the plan view.DWV. select the P-Trap on the left.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. under M_Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view.PVC . 53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select Standard.

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. enter 150 mm. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that 1. and verify the slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Finish.05% is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click to draw the pipe.Sch 40 .DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select Standard.Design. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. click Modify. 5 Select the tee. select the vertical stack.PVC . 3 In the Section view. 9 In the Type Selector. and click the intersection to place the fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Floor level line. select the elbow fitting on the right. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown.Plumbing Plan .Design. 10 In the 3D view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 2 Right-click Standard. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You create a new pipe type. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. However. In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 267 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.autodesk. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In this lesson.rvt.

4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. In this exercise. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. For System Type. For Pipe Type. or architectural components. and enter Fire Protection Wet. However. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that 2800 is specified. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click Rename. For Pipe Type. In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. duct. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. and click Properties. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. for Material. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Carbon Steel. For System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 2800 is selected. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 6 In the Project Browser. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Main. and then click OK. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed.

Design is highlighted. select Fire Protection. For Group parameter under. and click Element Properties. under Fire Protection. enter Zone 1. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select Spaces. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and then click OK. click Add. right-click. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the drawing area. for Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. the space crossing lines display. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Training Files. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Sprinkler Zone. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click OK twice. for Name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 8 Using a crossing window.

under Fire Protection. and then access instance properties. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. to which you add various parameters.rvt. you create schedules for sprinkler design. verify that only Spaces are selected. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. including a calculated value parameter. and then click OK. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. click Training Files.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Using the same method. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Zone 2. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

10 In the Format dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Millimeters. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Light. click the Formatting tab. For Key name. For Type of Parameter. select Maximum Spacing. enter Maximum Spacing. 11 Click OK twice. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and click Field Format.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab. Click OK. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 14 Select the new header. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Name. select mm. select Fire Protection. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 7 Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. click Add Parameter. For Group parameter under. For Rounding. select 0 decimal places. and on the ribbon. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 6 Using the same method. select Spaces. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Units. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Unit symbol. The schedule displays. Obstructed-Combustible. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Length. Select Schedule keys. double-click on each column separator. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Name.

enter 4575.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. and press Enter. Unobstructed Extra. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter 40. For Name. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

and click Field Format. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Fixed. For Rounding. select Common. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. For Discipline. 20 On the Formatting tab. select 0 decimal place. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. select Area. click . 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. 22 Click OK twice. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area. under Available fields. For Units. For Formula. Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .

For Fields. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. Select Header and Blank line. select Number. for Sorting/Grouping. and then select Hidden field. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then click Field Format. select Level. and click View Properties. Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. verify that Use default settings is selected. Under Field formatting. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. select Grand totals. click Edit. For Then by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). under Other. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 26 Click OK 3 times. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. for Sort by. select Hidden field. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone.

for Available fields. For Category. select Calculate totals. under Other. click Edit. select Sprinklers. Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. System Name. delete the word Maximum. 30 Click OK twice. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Grand totals. and click View Properties. click Edit. select Embedded Schedule. select Level equals Level 2. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. right-click the schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only. for Filter by.27 In the drawing area. On the Formatting tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Count. and Count. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Fields. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Filter. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Embedded Schedule.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Light. select space 221 Instruction. 52 Click OK. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. As a result. select Ordinary. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. and click OK. 46 With the space still selected. 41 In the plan view. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . but their values are not determined. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. and access the instance properties. select Ordinary. 44 In the schedule. 50 Access the instance properties. 48 In the floor plan. Unobstructed.Fire Protection Plan Design. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. double-click FP . 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you will understand the process. click Training Files. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. methodology. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. 279 . At the end of this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2 . By following the recommended workflow. As you create the system. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog.autodesk. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you place the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

When this happens. After placing the initial sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. verify that Constrain is cleared. 206. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 10 Press Esc twice. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. select the sprinklers that you placed. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 11 In the drawing area. 9 In space Instruction 202. and 207.

as shown. Next. 17 In the Project Browser. 200B. open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you place non-hosted sprinklers.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. you place non-hosted sprinklers. specify a vertical offset. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and 200C). 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. 18 Type WT. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.

22 In the 200A Corridor space. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 2900 mm. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Notice that the schedule updates. and press Enter. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Constraints. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Element Properties. After creating the logical connection. 25 Click OK. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.0. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.FP_Ceiling view. In the next exercise. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and with piping (physical connection). 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.19 In the floor plan. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. enter 4100. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. In this exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 11. you adjust the offset. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 29 Press Esc. for Offset. move the cursor to the right. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Next. For Number.

Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . as shown. However. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. As you assign sprinklers to systems.Design is highlighted. and select Piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Right-click the header. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.rvt. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. named Fire Protection Wet. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 11 With the system still selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. within the Piping Systems folder. indicating the logical connection. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and select the system. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. In the System Browser.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Next. and click Select. place the cursor over a sprinkler. press Tab. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.

When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset.0 is specified. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 20 On the Generate Layout panel. system equipment. 13 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Branch. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Offset. and a piping layout preview displays. The Generate Layout tools are activated.The Edit Piping System panel displays. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers.Wet is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 12 On the Options Bar. 15 In the drawing area. In the left pane. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. verify that 2800. enter -3650. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. as shown. providing system editing tools. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and on the Options Bar. click Place Base. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. for System Name. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select 150 mm. For Pipe Type. click Settings. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter FP Wet_Zone2. for Diameter. and number of elements in the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 22 On the Options Bar. click Solutions.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 4. click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and green represents branch lines).25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. In general. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. Creating a Piping System | 287 .

as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 32 If necessary. 29 Click Finish Layout. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. select a different layout solution.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.rvt. the Connect Into tool. and various manual pipe creation tools. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. click Training Files. 3 If necessary. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it.

and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. radiators. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. 8 In the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. or a system component to display system tools. click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system. air terminals. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.

Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . verify that Network is selected. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.11 On the Generate Layout panel.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 23 View the result in the 3D view. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. and then tile the views. and select solution 5. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Piping Plan. verify that Solutions is selected. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 13 Click Finish Layout. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 18 Click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. 12 On the Options Bar.

right-click. 29 Using the same method. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. select 2800. 28 In the drawing area. for Offset. 25 Select the sprinkler.24 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 4 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.Fire Protection Piping Plan . for Scale. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. select 1 : 50. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.rvt. Because the whole system highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

8 Right-click. and click View Properties.6 Press Esc. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view.

17 Move the cursor up. for View Name.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Design. right-click Design ➤ FP . 13 Select the elbow fitting. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Pipe. 10 In the Project Browser. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. enter 2135. drag the top section boundary line up. enter FP Section_Stair. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then right-click the top connector.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select FP .Design the active view. For View Classification. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Press Spacebar. select MEP Section. 19 Make Level 2 . and then click Modify.Fire Protection Plan . select Design. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 12 If necessary. For Default View Template. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 14 Select the tee fitting. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 22 In the drawing area.

25 Verify that Fire Protection . 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active.23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and then click Modify. select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. and click Draw Pipe.

34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.rfa. verify that M_Gate Valve . and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . as shown. 31 In the alert dialog.29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 32 In the Open dialog. and click Open. click Yes to load a family.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.

or height. 7 On the Options Bar. Changing the diameter. or width. width. height. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . for Diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 6 In the Filter dialog.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. and click OK. 4 In the floor plan view. select 25mm. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. click Check None. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 8 Click Modify. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. width. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

. select the linked architectural file. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 18 In the 3D view. click to place the tag. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. NOTE Tags are view specific. Press Esc. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. and after each segment highlights. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. By hiding the linked file. They display only in the view in which they were placed.rfa. 12 If necessary. and click Open. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. press Tab.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. select 100mm. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The main piping is selected and displays in red. and when the section highlights.

as shown. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 In the drawing area. and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. select 40mm. 23 Close the 3D view.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this exercise. For additional practice. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .

304 .

305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.rvt. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Properties. and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and apply a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 307 . You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. click Training Files. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. matchlines. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Rename. dependent views.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 Right-click the dependent view title.rvt. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and then press Esc. views and put them on the sheet. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. more focused. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 4 Using the same method. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 7 Close the file without saving. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. click Training Files. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 10 In the drawing area. as shown. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.

For Line Pattern. In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select black. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 19 In the drawing area. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and then press Esc. 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 21 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .20 Select the upper view reference and. 25 Using the same method. as shown. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. on the Options Bar. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.

enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and click Properties.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Name. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 27 Using the same method. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. and select the section box. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click Training Files. select Plumbing Isometric. 2 Zoom in. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Domestic Water. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. For Default View Template. 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

6 In the Project Browser. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. and then click OK. select Dash. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 Right-click. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.Domestic Water.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Documentation. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. For Sub-Discipline. Click OK. The section crop lines no longer display. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click Apply. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. for View Classification. select 3. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Apply Default View Template. select Plumbing.

13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 15 Right-click. as shown).14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . specify Plumbing . rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .Isometric. click on the Format value. and for Default View Template.16 Press Esc. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.5mm Arial. For Slope. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and in the Type Selector. and in the view properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Sanitary Waste. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. select 1. On the View Control Bar. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 19 Using methods learned previously. verify that Common is selected. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. as shown. click Training Files.rvt. 22 Click OK twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select To the nearest 10. for Rounding. 26 Press Esc twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ In the Format dialog. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. When the view is associated with a sheet.

6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). Creating Callout Views | 317 . and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 1 : 50.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK. and select the viewport. for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 13 In the Project Browser. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. double-click M601 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

For Default View Template. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 . for View Name. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view. under Names. and click Apply View Template.

322 .

create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Creating Annotations In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and annotation to create a legend. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. duct tags. linetypes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 323 . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. as shown. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. symbols. work with model-based components.

use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 8 With the text still selected. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Press Esc twice.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a return diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. a segment of round duct. and then click Right Straight.

as shown. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.17 Click Modify. under Category. 25 In the drawing area. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. If necessary. for Ducts. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 20 In the Tags dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click OK. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click Open. click Load.rfa. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 21 In the Load Family dialog.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End. Leader. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.26 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.

36 Press Esc twice. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. as shown. for Leader. select Free End. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. not simply an instance property. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and click OK. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions | 329 . drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. That’s because you changed a type property. and lock lighting fixtures. 40 Using the method learned previously. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.rvt.

and then select the interior face of the wall. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 14 Using the same method. On the Options Bar. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 12 Click EQ. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.5 Click to create a permanent dimension.

16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Press Esc. enter 2430. 20 Using the same methods. and notes.rvt. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend | 331 . Because the dimensions are locked. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m.9). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linework. and offset them from the wall.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and press Enter. annotation symbols. click Training Files. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.

10 Using the same method.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. For View. select 1 : 50.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Click OK. select Floor Plan. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click below the title to place the diffuser. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and select 1. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For Scale.200 Neck.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1. Creating a Legend | 333 . click next to the top diffuser.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP and its text note. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 21 Press Esc.

33 Click to the left of the left break line. 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 335 .30 Select Spot Elevation . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 34 Using the method learned previously. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Title w Line .39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.113 East elevation view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. click Training Files. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. detail groups. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 337 . A drafting view using detail components. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A detail callout that references another view.

and click to place it. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser . 7 Drag the Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 8 Using the same method. clear Leader. Next. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 East on the sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and then modify and align the views. 4 On the Options Bar. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

select the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. and click Deactivate View. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.

right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and select Title w Line . select the 113 East elevation view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 22 Press Esc.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. you add wiring to the diagram. and click Activate View. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 21 Using the drag control. right-click.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line.

click New.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click OK. notice that there are no snaps active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 2 Close the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. expand Lines. 9 Beginning at the transformer. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. verify that Chain is selected. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Modify Subcategories. In the New Subcategory dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. As you draw. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. for Name. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 8 On the Options Bar. select 6. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . for Line Weight. enter Electrical Power. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the Line Styles dialog.113 North view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and then click OK.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. as shown.

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Multiple. 28 Click above the cap. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and select 1.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

and then press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. enter 12.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 42 On the Options Bar. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter 3. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click on the length dimension value. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method. change the length of the bottom line to 3. enter 7. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.0.

while pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. expand Groups ➤ Detail. for Name. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 54 Select the group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 52 Select the detail group. select all 3 lines. 46 In the Project Browser. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and then press Esc. 50 With the group selected. 51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. enter Ground. and click OK.

59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and will place it on sheet E01. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. In later exercises. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 2 Zoom in to view the section.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 6 In the Rename View dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. for Name. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 8 On the ViewCube. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and double click Typical Make Up Air. select 3D Views. and then click the corner where the Top. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. Back. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and Left sides converge. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. click Home. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Apply View Template. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Walkthroughs. and click OK. and click Rename. 3 Select the section box. and then press Esc. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.

14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. 15 Using the same method. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and click to specify the second leader point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.■ ■ Under Names. select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

24 Access the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. and then click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 23 Click on the crop region. and under Extents. under Extents.18 Press Esc. as shown. 19 Complete the text labels.

scroll down. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. and under Extents. select Crop View and Section Box. Place a detail component. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Training Files. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Right click the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 32 In the Instance Properties. and click Activate View. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. and click View Properties.rvt.25 Click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 33 Right-click the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

as shown. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 13 In the drawing area. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. click the point at the top of the drain. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. right-click the view name. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 12 On the Element panel. select Plumbing. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View Classification. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 9 Zoom in to the component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. as the rectangle start point. Click OK. For Scale. and click Properties. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 3 In the Project Browser.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. select 1 : 5. select Documentation. for Sub-Discipline. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Click OK.

17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Type.P. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 21 In the drawing area. select C. 20 Select 1.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and then press Esc. and click OK. Concrete.I.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Press Esc. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 23 In the drawing area. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. (Line). select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 28 Click Modify. select the filled region. and then click to select them. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc.

. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 45 Using the method learned previously. and click OK. as shown. draw wide detail lines as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. select the Flashing Membrane group. 49 Click Modify. and then click to select them.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain. (Rectangle).Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. press Spacebar twice. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown.62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 67 On the Options Bar. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

78 Move the cursor to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 71 Click Modify. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. and then click OK.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point. select 15000 (Division 15 .Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 72 If necessary.70 In the Keynotes dialog. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and click to specify the second leader point.

as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. 90 Press Esc. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful